2005 pilot online reference owner's manual...

273
2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii Important Handling Information..................................................................................................... iii Your Vehicle at a Glance ..................................................................................................................... 4 Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 7 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 55 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features ................................................................................................ 99 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 145 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 157 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 187 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 223 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 243 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 257 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 261 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Upload: duongtram

Post on 08-Feb-2018

217 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Important Handling Information .....................................................................................................iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................4Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................7Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 55Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features ................................................................................................ 99How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 145What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 157The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 187The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 223This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 243ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 257A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 261How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Page 2: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Pilot. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33S9VC20

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Page 3: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

Page 4: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

--

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

on the vehicle.Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Page 5: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or an accident.

Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

158183Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iii

Page 6: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

GAUGES

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL REAR A/C CONTROL

INSTRUMENT PANEL SHIFT LEVER (A/T)(P. 57)(P. 66)

(P. 78)

(P. 89)

(P. 90)

(P. 148)

(P. 147) (P. 93) (P. 105)

(P. 100)

(P. 106)

(P. 160)

Page 7: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

CRUISE CONTROL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

VTM-4 LOCK

HORN

CRUISECONTROLMASTERSWITCH

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

VSA OFFSWITCH

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

(P. 71) (P. 73)

(P. 164)

(P. 31)

(P. 73)

(P. 70)(P. 138)

(P. 74)(P. 122)

(P. 138)

(P. 172)

(P. 97)

(P. 92)MOONROOF BUTTONS

Page 8: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

6

Page 9: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 11

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the

...Lap/Shoulder Seat Belts . 156. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 17.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22Additional Information About

..........................Your Airbags . 23......Airbag System Components . 23

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

......................Advanced Airbags . 27...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28

How the SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Passenger Airbag off......................Indicator Works . 31

.............................Airbag Service . 32...Additional Safety Precautions . 33

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 34

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 34

All Children Should Sit in the.................................Back Seat . 35

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 37

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 37

...Additional Safety Precautions . 38...........................Protecting Infants . 39

.............Protecting Small Children . 40.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41....................Installing a Child Seat . 42

Installing a Child Seat Using.....................................LATCH . 43

Installing a Child Seat with a..................Lap/shoulder Belt . 45

Installing a Child Seat with a......................................Tether . 47

...........Protecting Larger Children . 49...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 49

..................Using a Booster Seat . 50...Additional Safety Precautions . 52

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53...................................Safety Labels . 54

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

Page 10: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until theycan use the belt properly without abooster (see page ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

15

34

187

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

8

Page 11: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

(7)(10)

(9) (3) (1) (4)

(2)(6)(10)

(7) (8)(5)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats & Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Airbags(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(9) Door Locks(10) Side Airbags

Page 12: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 13: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact. (See page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork.)

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright, and as far back from thesteering wheel while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. A frontpassenger should move their seat asfar back from the dashboard aspossible.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

25

28

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.Airbags can pose hazards.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

Page 14: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even where seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate are closed and locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate monitor indicator

on the instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door or the tailgate isnot tightly closed.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

5234

Close and Lock the DoorsProtecting Adults and Teens

Introduction

1.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features, Protecting Adults and Teens

12

Page 15: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel in and out (see page

).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doormonitor indicator works.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

6278

74

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front Seats2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Page 16: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

83

83

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Page 17: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

The seat belt in the center of thesecond row and all third row seatbelts can be unlatched and retractedto allow the seats to be folded down.See page for how to unlatch andrelatch the seat belts.

Adjust the head restraints so theback of your head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

87

88For second and third row passengers

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4. 5.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Page 18: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Protecting Adults and Teens

16

RELEASEBUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 19: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

20

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

Page 20: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Protecting Adults and Teens

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 21: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

Page 22: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all eight seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseat of the second and third rowseats is equipped with a detachableanchor that has two parts: a smalllatch plate and a buckle.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

The detachable anchor shouldnormally be latched whenever theseats-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable anchor (see page ).

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your seat belt,the beeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

88

1545

Lap/Shoulder BeltSeat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

20

Page 23: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causefront-airbag inflation.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags do not deploy. In this case,the airbags would not be needed, butthe additional restraint could behelpful.

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

Page 24: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. Any belt thatis not in good condition or notworking properly will not providegood protection and should bereplaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

213

Honda Warranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 25: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassengers’ airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

25

28

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(4)

(5)

(6) (8)(10)

(8)

(7)

(9)(9)

(7)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensor(9) Side Impact Sensors(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

Page 26: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and automatically turnthe airbag off (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. These automatically turn offthe passenger’s front airbag ifthey detect an infant or small childmay be in the seat (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition is in the ON (II) position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the frontpassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

21

27

30

31

31

27

27

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

Page 27: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 31

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

Page 28: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

It the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

26

Page 29: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS Indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. If the sensors detectan infant or small child may be in theseat, the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

Page 30: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of thepassenger’s seat.

If there is no passenger in the frontseat, the airbag will be off. However,the Passenger Airbag Off indicatorwill not come on.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat. If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

31

213

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

28

Page 31: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

If the Side Airbag Off Indicatorcomes on (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Although we do not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans sideways andthe child’s head is in the side airbagdeployment path.

31

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Side Airbag Cutoff System

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

Page 32: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), this indicator will come onbriefly then go out. This tells you thesystem is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

This indicatoralerts you that thepassenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

58

How the SRS Indicator Works How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

Additional Information About Your Airbags

30

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

Page 33: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect an infant or small child maybe in the front passenger’s seat. Itdoes there is a problemwith the airbag.

The Passenger Airbag Off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright and wear the seat beltproperly.

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

However, if the indicator comes onwith no passenger in the front, orwith an adult in the seat, there maybe a problem with the advancedairbag system. Have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

Page 34: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized your dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

An airbag ever inflates.Airbag Service

32

Page 35: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Page 36: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

--

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

39 4849 52

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

34

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

Page 37: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do thisthe passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system, whichcan automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), please follow theguidelines below.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

27

49

CONTINUED

Protecting Children General Guidelines

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

Page 38: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

36

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

Page 39: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.

13

49

17

17

Protecting Children General Guidelines

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

Page 40: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

79

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

38

Page 41: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position.

Or, it can interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Page 42: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

In any situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childseat directly behind the frontpassenger’s seat, move the seat asfar forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

31

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

40

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 43: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to

provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) system.

43

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Page 44: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

42

Page 45: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the outersecond row seats. The lower anchorsare located between the seat-backand seat bottom, and are to be usedonly with a child seat designed foruse with LATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

Rigid type

LOWERANCHORS

Page 46: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint, over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

4.

5.

6.

7.

87

Installing a Child Seat

44

TETHER STRAP HOOKFlexible type

ANCHOR

Page 47: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Page 48: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

46

Page 49: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle has attachment pointsfor a tether-style child seat to beinstalled on the second or third rowas shown.

Each second row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seatback.

There are three anchorage points onthe tailgate sill. Select the anchoragepoint you want to use, and slide thecover to open it (outboard anchor),or remove the cover (center anchor).

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Second Seat Installation: Third Seat Installation:

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Page 50: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Lift the head restraint, then routethe tether strap over the seat-backbetween the legs of the headrestraint.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether attachment point, and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.

Installing a Child Seat

48

Page 51: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Page 52: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards (see page ) andthat you follow the booster seatmaker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far to the rear as possible,and be sure the child is wearing theseat belt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

4.

5.

3.

41

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

50

Page 53: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a boosterseat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

49

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

Page 54: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Larger Children

52

Page 55: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside. 1.

2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 56: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully. Ifa label comes off or becomes hard toread, contact your dealer for areplacement.

U.S. models only

Canadian models

U.S. models

U.S. models only

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

54

RADIATOR CAP

HOOD

DASHBOARD SUN VISOR

DOORJAMBS

Page 57: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56............................Instrument Panel . 57

.............................................Gauges . 66...............Odometer/Trip Meter . 66

..................................Fuel Gauge . 66...................Temperature Gauge . 67

....Outside Temperature Gauge . 67..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 68

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 69

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 70...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 71

................Daytime Running Lights . 72........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72

.................Hazard Warning Button . 73

.................Rear Window Defogger . 73..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 74

...............................Keys and Locks . 75........................Immobilizer System . 75

................................Ignition Switch . 77......................................Door Locks . 78

......................Power Door Locks . 78..............Childproof Door Locks . 79

.......................Remote Transmitter . 79..................................Seats Heaters . 82

.................................................Seats . 83

......Detachable Seat Belt Anchors . 88.............................................Mirrors . 88

..............................Power Windows . 90.........................................Moonroof . 92

.................................Parking Brake . 93...........Interior Convenience Items . 94

.......................Beverage Holders . 95..........Accessory Power Sockets . 95

...............Console Compartment . 95......................Sunglasses Holder . 96

....................................Glove Box . 96......................................Sun Visor . 96

...............................................Lights . 97

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

55

Page 58: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Control Locations

56

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR A/C CONTROL

INSTRUMENT PANELGAUGES

SHIFT LEVER (A/T)(P.57)(P.66)

(P.78)

(P.89)

(P.90)

(P.148)

(P.147) (P.93)(P.105)

(P.100)

(P.106)

(P.160)

Page 59: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUEDThe U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.Canadian models only

1

2

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

57

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN MONITOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

BRAKE LAMP INDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

TIRE PRESSUREMONITOR

TPMS INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEM (VSA)INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKEAND BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

WASHER LEVELINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAGCUTOFF INDICATOR

(P.59)

(P.58)

(P.58)

(P.58)

(P.58)

(P.62)

(P.61)

(P.58)

(P.64)

(P.59)

(P.61)

(P.63)

(P.64)

(P.59)

(P.65)

(P.63)

(P.63)

(P.60)

(P.61)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.60)

(P.58)

‘‘DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS’’ INDICATOR (P.63)

1

2

1

2

Page 60: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

See page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Itreminds you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts. A beeper alsosounds if you have not fastened yourseat belt.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your seat belt,the beeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II). If it comes on at any other time,it indicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Ifit comes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

30

235

234

234

30

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Side Airbag OffIndicator

Instrument Panel

58

U.S. Canada

Page 61: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This indicator has two functions:

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). It will go off if youhave inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe ABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis on, your vehicle still has normalbraking ability but no anti-lockbrakes. For more information, seepage .

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). It is areminder to check the parkingbrake. A beeper sounds if you tryto drive with the parking brake notfully released. Driving with theparking brake not fully releasedcan damage the brakes and tires.

1.

2.

236

169

75

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

U.S. Canada

Page 62: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer. WithoutVSA, your vehicle still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). For moreinformation, see page .

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the VehicleStability Assist (VSA) system.

This indicator has three functions:This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). 1.

2.

3.

171

171

171

On EX-L models On EX-L models

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

60

Page 63: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition to ON (II).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition to ON (II).If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure on the tirepressure monitor, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). Refer to page

for more information.

The appropriate tire indicator willcome on along with the low tirepressure indicator if a tire isextremely under inflated or hassuddenly lost pressure. See

for what todo if this indicator comes on.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), there is a problemwith the TPMS. With this indicatoron, the low tire pressure indicatorand the tire pressure monitor will notcome on when a tire loses pressure.Take the vehicle to your dealer tohave the system checked.224

237165

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitor

LowTire Pressure Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

Page 64: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blinkor blink rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

If a brake light does not work, theindicator comes on

when you push the brake pedal withthe ignition switch in the ON (II)position.

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

All the indicators in the monitorcome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

When you push the Hazard Warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsblink. All turn signals on the outsideof the vehicle should flash.

The appropriate indicator comes onin this monitor if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly.

209

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor

Instrument Panel

62

BRAKE LAMP

Page 65: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Canadian models only Canadian models onlyThis indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)with the headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

138

71

72

203

High Beam Indicator‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

63

Page 66: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If the indicator blinks while driving,pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. The indicatorshould come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II). If it comes on while driving,it indicates the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If thisindicator comes on at any other time,there is a problem in the 4WDsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked.

A/T TemperatureIndicator

VTM-4 Indicator

Instrument Panel

64

Continuing to drive with the A/TTemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

Page 67: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages and .

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourdealer, reset the indicator as follows.

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for 2 secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash for10 seconds.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the Select/Resetbutton on the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the button for about 10seconds until the indicator goesoff.

1.

2.

3.

192 193

Instrument Panel

Maintenance Required Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR

SELECT/RESET BUTTON

Page 68: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’ Both trip meters will reset ifthe vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the outside temperaturedisplay (except LX model)bypressing the Select/Reset buttonrepeatedly.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Trip Meter

Odometer

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

66

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TRIP METERSELECT/RESETBUTTON

TRIP METER

ODOMETER/OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE/CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Page 69: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

± ±

- - - -- - - -

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle white mark. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper white mark. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset button until thetemperature is displayed.

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the Select/Resetknob for 10 seconds. The followingsequences appear, 1 second at atime: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the Select/Reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

204

On EX and EX-L modelsTemperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

67

Page 70: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears as text in the odometer/outside temperature display afteryou start the engine. Turn theengine off and confirm the fuel cap isinstalled. If it is, loosen the cap, thenretighten it at least 3 clicks. Whenyou restart the engine, the messageappears again. To clear, press andhold the Trip/Reset button until themessage is replaced by theodometer/outside temperaturedisplay.

If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (MIL) comes on.Turn the engine off and check orretighten the fuel cap at least 3 clicks.The MIL goes out after 3 days ofnormal driving once the cap istightened or replaced. If it does notgo out, have your dealer inspect thevehicle. For more information, seepage .235

Gauges

Check Fuel Cap Indicator(odometer/outside temperaturemessage)

68

Page 71: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

* To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.

Controls Near the Steering WheelInstrum

entsand

Controls

69

VTM-4 LOCKLIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

CRUISE CONTROL

HAZARD WARNING BUTTONHEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

CRUISE CONTROLMASTER SWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

VSA OFF SWITCH

MOON ROOF

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

HORN

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

(P.92)

(P.97)

(P.172)

(P.138)

(P.122)

(P.74)(P.138)

(P.70)

(P.73)

(P.31)

(P.164)

(P.73)(P.71)

Page 72: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

---

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield Washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.Hold past ON to turn the windowwiper on and to spray the windowwasher.OFFRotate the switchcounterclockwise to spray thewindow washer without activatingthe wiper.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you andhold it. The washers spray untilyou release the lever. The wipersrun at low speed, then completeone more sweep after you releasethe lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

1.

2.

3.4.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

MIST

LO

OFF

INT

HI

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

70

Page 73: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

--

To turn on the highbeams, push the lever forward untilyou hear a click. The blue high beamindicator will come on (see page ).To turn off the high beams, pull thelever back. To flash the high beams,pull the lever farther back, and thenrelease it. The high beams remain onuntil the lever is released.

Turn SignalOFFParking and interior lightsHeadlights onHigh BeamsFlash high beams

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever inthe proper direction and hold it. Thelever will return to center when yourelease it or complete a turn.

Turning the switchon the left lever to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the parking lights,taillights, instrument panel lights,side-marker lights, and rear licenseplate lights. Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), youwill hear a reminder chime when youopen the driver’s door.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

63

Turn Signal and Headlights

High BeamsTurn Signal

Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

Page 74: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionswitch off, even if you set theparking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn the switchto the ‘‘ ’’ position.

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, side markerlights, license plate lights, andinstrument panel lights within 15seconds of removing the key fromthe ignition switch and closing thedriver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,then open and close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

On EX and EX-L modelInstrument Panel Brightness

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

72

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

Page 75: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove the button comes on to showthe defogger is on. If you do not turnit off, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Push the red button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and bothindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

Hazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

LX model

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

EX and EX-L models

Page 76: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints to your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

74

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Page 77: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxlocked when you leave your vehicleand the valet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

75

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

KEYNUMBERTAG

VALET KEY(GRAY)

Page 78: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the immobilizer systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

Immobilizer System

76

Page 79: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

--

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of thelights on the instrument panel comeon as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

LOCK (0)START (III)

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

Ignition SwitchInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Page 80: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up. To close the tailgate, usethe inner handle to pull it down, thenpress down on the back edge.

Keep the tailgate and the hatch glassclosed at all times while driving toavoid damaging the tailgate and thehatch glass, and to prevent exhaustgas from getting into the interior.See onpage .

To lock the doors and the tailgate,press the master door lock switch oneither front door, press the lock tabdown on the driver’s door, or use thekey on the outside lock on the driver’sdoor.

Pressing up on either master doorlock switch will unlock all of thedoors and the tailgate.

The lock tab on any door locks andunlocks that door. To unlock thedriver’s door from the outside, turnthe key and release it. If you turnand hold it, all doors and the tailgateunlock.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. They arenot disabled if the driver’s door isclosed. Pushing the switch down onthe open passenger’s door will lockall doors and the tailgate.

53

Power Door Locks Tailgate

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

78

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK TAB

Page 81: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

-The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors andthe tailgate. Some exterior lights willflash twice each time you press thebutton.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about30 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

If you do not open any door within 30seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior and interior lights will flash.When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system hasset. You cannot lock it if any door isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

Childproof Door Locks UNLOCK

LOCK

Remote Transmitter

Childproof Door Locks, Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

LOCK COVER

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

LED

Page 82: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Battery type: CR1616

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

1.

2.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter Care

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

80

SCREW

Page 83: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

Install the parts in reverse order.

3.

4.

5.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

81

BATTERY

TAB

Page 84: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use the heaters.

Push the top of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

If equipped

Remote Transmitter, Seat Heaters

Seat Heaters

82

SEAT HEATERS SEAT HEATER BUTTONS

Page 85: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat back angle.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Raises or lowers theseat.

Moves the front of theseat up or down andthe rear of the seat upor down.

Moves the seatforward and backward.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14On EX and EX-L models On EX and EX-L models

Driver’s Lumbar SupportPower Seat Adjustment

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

83

Page 86: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom, and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe front seat cushion. Then try tomove the seat to make sure it islocked into position.

On DX modelManual Seat Adjustments Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment

Seats

84

Page 87: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To change the angle of the seats inthe second row seat-backs, pull upthe handle on the seat-back. Movingthe short vertical switch forward orbackward adjusts the seat back inthose directions.

The left and right halves can befolded separately.

Push the whole seat backwards untilfully latches. Make sure the seat islocked and secured before driving.

If you are folding the left half ofthe seat, use the ignition key torelease the center seat belt fromthe detachable anchor (see page

).

Lower the head restraint fully.

Pull up the handle on the outsideof the seat-back.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to its upright position. Makesure the seat is locked and securedbefore driving.

To get into the third row seats, pullup the lever on the outside of thepassenger’s side second row seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and the seat will slide forward.

To adjust the seats forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion. After moving theseat, make sure it is locked intoposition.

2.

3.

1.

4.

88

Adjusting the Second Row Seats Folding the Second Row Seats Third Seat Access

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

85

SECONDROW SEAT RELEASE LEVER

Page 88: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Remove the head restraints bypushing the release buttons andpulling the restraints out.

Store the head restraints underthe cargo area floor. Insert theshafts into the holes in the sides ofthe storage compartment.

Use the ignition key to release theseat belt from the detachableanchor. See page .

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

Make sure you clip the small latchplate of each outer shoulder belt tothe seat belt webbing whenever thethird seat is folded.

Pull the handle on the back of theseat, move the seat-back to thedesired position and release thehandle. Let the seat-back latch intothe new position.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard. Seeon page .

Reinstall the head restraints,reconnect the seat belts, and makesure the seats are secured beforedriving.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to its upright position.1.

2.

3.

4.

88

153

Adjusting the Third Row Seat Folding the Third Row Seat

Carrying Cargo

Seats

86

THIRD ROWSEAT HANDLE

Page 89: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The head restraints in the secondand third row seats adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. To raise it, pull upward. Tolower it, push the release buttonsideways, and push the restraintdown.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15

Head Restraints

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

RELEASE BUTTON

Page 90: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert a key into the slot on the sideof the small buckle. Line up thetriangle marks on the plate andbuckle when reattaching the belt andbuckle. The inside mirror has day and night

positions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

Seats, Mirrors

Detachable Seat Belt Anchors Mirrors

88

SMALL LATCH PLATE

TAB

TRIANGULAR MARK

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

Page 91: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Power Mirror Heaters(If equipped)

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

SELECTOR SWITCH

Page 92: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower any window. Toopen the window, push the switchdown and hold it. Release the switchwhen you want the window to stop.Pull back on the switch and hold it toclose the window.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

The passenger windows cannot beraised or lowered if the MAIN switchis OFF. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

To open the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down, then release it. To stopthe window from going all the waydown, pull back on the windowswitch briefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. To stop the windowfrom going all the way up, pushdown on the window switch briefly.

Power Windows

AUTO

90

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 93: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

Power Windows

AUTO REVERSE

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

Page 94: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the upper button( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the lower button( ). Release the button whenthe moonroof gets to the desiredposition. Make sure everyone’shands are away from the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

The moonroof has a key-off delayfunction. You can still open and closethe moonroof for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.The key-off delay function cancels assoon as you open either front door.You must then turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II) to operate themoonroof.

If equipped

Moonroof

92

CLOSE BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

TILT-UPBUTTON

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Page 95: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, push on the pedal again.The parking brake indicator on theinstrument panel should go out whenthe parking brake is fully releasedwith the engine running (see page

).59

Parking BrakeInstrum

entsand

Controls

93

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs.

Page 96: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Interior Convenience Items

94

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

GLOVE BOX

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

SUN VISORS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS(EX and EX-L models)

Page 97: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the rear door pocket beverageholders when you close the reardoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets. Thefront beverage holders can beinstalled under the slide.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever and lift the lid.

Pivot the door of the console forwardand you can store a cellular phone, asmall notepad, and business cards init.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less(10 amps).Spilled liquids can damage the

upholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Interior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders Console CompartmentAccessory Power Sockets

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

Page 98: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To open and close the sunglassesholder, push on the front edge.Make sure the holder is closed whileyou are driving. Some larger stylesof sunglasses may not fit in theholder.

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the parking lights are on.

When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip and swing it out. Slidethe extension out to get morecoverage on side windows.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle. Do not usethe sun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

Interior Convenience Items

Glove BoxSunglasses Holder Sun Visor

96

EXTENSION

SUN VISOR

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 99: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

When this switch is in the position:

When this switch is in the position:

When the switch is in theposition:

ONAll the individual map lights comeon.

None of the lights come on when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

OFF

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off withthe switches next to the lights.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows cannot beturned on.

DoorActivated

The individual map lights come onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened, or when the remotetransmitter is used to unlock thedoors.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows can beturned on and off by pressing thelens.

The tailgate light comes on whenyou open the tailgate if the lightswitch is in the ON position.

The lights go out about 6 secondsafter all the doors and the tailgateare closed. With any door or thetailgate left open, the lights stayon about 3 minutes, then go out.

Lights

Light Control Switch

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

ON

DOORACTIVATEDPOSITION OFF

Page 100: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Turn on the front and second rowindividual map lights by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can also operate these lightswith the light control switch (seepage ).

The light in the tailgate has an on-offswitch to control if the light comeson when the tailgate is opened.

The courtesy lights in the frontdoors and around the ignition switchcome on when you open any door.After you close the door, the ignitionswitch light stays on for severalseconds.

97

Lights

Individual Map Lights

Tailgate Light

Individual Interior Lights

98

Page 101: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your vehicle provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 100.......................Air Flow Buttons . 101

.............................Climate Control . 104.....................Rear A/C Control . 105

..........................Playing the Radio . 106........................Radio Reception . 109

..................................Playing a CD . 111......................CD Changer . 113, 114

.................Protecting your CDs . 116.....CD Player Error Messages . 117

.CD Changer Error Messages . 118...............................Playing a Tape . 119

................Remote Audio Controls . 122.................Radio Theft Protection . 123

..........................Setting the Clock . 124........Rear Entertainment System . 125

..................DVD Specifications . 134............................Security System . 137

...............................Cruise Control . 138HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 140

On EX and EX-L models

FeaturesF

eatures

99

Page 102: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Vents, Heating, and A/C

100

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

FAN CONTROLDIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

MODE CONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

FAN SPEEDINDICATOR

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIALAUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

REAR A/CCONTROL

TEMPERATUREDISPLAY

LX MODEL

EX and EX-L MODEL

Page 103: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

On LX models

On EX and EX-L models

On EX and EX-L models

, turn this dial clockwiseto increase fan speed and increasethe airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Use the mode control dial or buttonsto select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

Airflows from the center andcorner vents in the dashboard.

Airflows from the floor vents.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

, you canmanually select the fan speed bypressing the fan control buttons. Thefan speed is represented by verticalbars in the display.

, you will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set the dial belowthe outside temperature.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

73

Fan Control

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

Recirculation Button

Airflow ButtonsF

eatures

101

Page 104: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The vehicle has two A/C andheater units. The LX units areindependently controlled. The EXunits are controlled by the frontpanel controls, unless the RR A/CManual button is selected.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in Fresh Air mode.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial orbuttons.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. In this case you cannot turn theA/C off.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode and turns on the A/C.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.1.

2.3.

5.

67

If the interior is very warm,

Using the Heater

Using the A/CVentilation

Airflow Buttons, Vents, Heating, and A/C

102

NOTE:

Page 105: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to Fresh Air mode andturns on the A/C.Adjust the temperature controldial so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below it. This willsend more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select the freshair mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial to your preference.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

1.

2.3.

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Features

103

Page 106: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

When you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of FULL AUTOmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Press the buttonrepeatedly to make the fan run faster.

When thesystem is in FULL AUTO, the rearA/C passenger control dial cannotbe used. Pressing the RR A/C buttondisables the FULL AUTO function.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL in the display to go out.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the AUTO button.Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see FULL AUTO inthe system’s display.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

1.2.

Rear A/C Control

On EX and EX-L models

Climate Control

Semi-automatic OperationAutomatic Climate Control

To Turn Everything Off

104

Page 107: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Press the RR A/C MANUAL buttonto enable the rear A/C control panel.The indicator in the button will comeon. A passenger in the second rowcan then use the temperature controldial, fan speed dial, and modebuttons to adjust the temperatureand airflow to their preference. Thisis limited by the system’s minimumand maximum temperature.

EX and EX-L models

Climate Control

Using the Rear A/C Unit Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Features

105

REAR A/C CONTROL BUTTON SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSORAUTO BUTTON

Page 108: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Playing the Radio

106

PWR/VOLKNOB

PWR/VOL KNOB

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

SCANBUTTON SEEK

BUTTONS

TUNE/MODEKNOB

SEEKBUTTONS

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

PWR/VOL KNOBSTEREO INDICATOR

SCANINDICATOR

TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONSSEEK/SKIPBAR

SCAN BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

MODEKNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

TUNE/MODE KNOB

SCANBUTTONPRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

LX MODEL

EX-L MODELwith RES

EX and EX-LMODELS

Page 109: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- +

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe PWR/VOL knob.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the /( ) or /( )side of the bar, then release it.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about five seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for five seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio station on the selectedband: , , , thepreset buttons, and

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Playing the Radio

To Play the Radio SEEK

SCAN

Preset

TUNE

To Select a Station

TUNE SEEK SCANAUTO SELECT.

Features

107

Page 110: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- -

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the MODE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. Thesystem will automatically return thedisplay to the selected audio modeabout five seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Press the MODE knob repeatedly todisplay the Bass (BAS), Treble(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader(FAD) settings.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if AutoSelect cannot find a strong stationfor every preset button.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find stations, thenstore them in the preset buttons asdescribed previously.

72

To turn off Auto Select,

Playing the Radio

AUTO SELECT

Audio System Lighting

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Adjusting the Sound

108

Page 111: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

CONTINUED

Radio Reception

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Features

109

Page 112: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Radio Reception

110

Page 113: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Playing a CDF

eatures

111

PWR/VOL KNOB

REPEAT INDICATOR

CD SLOT

CD EJECTBUTTONCD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

CD SLOT

CD EJECTBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONSSKIP BUTTONS

SEEK/SKIP BAR RANDOM INDICATOR

CD BUTTONCD BUTTON

CD BUTTON

CD EJECTBUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

REPEAT BUTTONLX MODEL

EX-L MODELwith RES

EX and EX-LMODELS

Page 114: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

-+

+-

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way and begin to play it.

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the track playing isshown in the display. The system willcontinuously play a CD until youchange modes.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press the RPT button againto turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activateRandom Play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. This continues until youpress the RDM button again.

Each time you press andrelease /( ), the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release /( )to skip backward to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the /( ) or /( ). You will see CUE or REW inthe display.

Playing a CD, CD Changer

To Play a CD REPEAT

RANDOM

SKIP

112

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

Page 115: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- +

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.Press the AM/FM button to switchto the radio while a CD is playing.Press the CD button to play the CD.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the CD will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The CD and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different CD, use the preset 5(DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC )button. If you select an empty slot inthe magazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot.

Standard on EX-L model with NavigationSystemOptional on LX model

To Stop Playing a CD Operating the CD Changer

Playing a CD, CD ChangerF

eatures

113

Page 116: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the appropriatepreset buttons (1 6). On the modelwith Navigation System, use thepreset 5 (DISC ) button to selectprevious disc, or the preset 6 (DISC

) button to select the next disc insequence.

The audio system has an in-dash CDchanger that holds up to six discs.To load CDs or operate CD changer,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Press and release any of thenumbered buttons on the CDchanger. The indicator over thebutton begins to blink green.

When the indicator blinks greenand red insert a CD into the slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. If you do not load a CDwithin 10 seconds, the indicatorstops flashing, and system selectsthe next CD in the changer.

To load another CD, repeat steps 1and 2. Do this again until all sixpositions are loaded. The systemwill begin playing the last CDloaded.

1.

2.

3.

EX and EX-L models Operating the In-Dash CDChanger

Loading CDs in the Changer

CD Changer

114

Page 117: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you press the eject button whilelistening to the radio or tape, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in the numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress any of the numbered button,the system will wait for 10 seconds,then stop the load operation andbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you press any of the numberedbutton while a disc is playing, thesystem will stop playing that disc andstart the loading sequence. It willthen play the disc just loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate numberedbutton. Select an empty position, andpress the numbered button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notload another CD, after 10 secondsthe system begins playing the nextdisc in the changer.

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds and beginplaying it.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate numbered button.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject up to six discs, one at atime.

Removing CDs from the Changer

CD ChangerF

eatures

115

Page 118: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

116

Page 119: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error,or a DVD hasbeen loaded in theCD player

High Temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.Check the CD for damage or deformation. Ifthe CD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the CD isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

CD Player Error MessagesF

eatures

117

Page 120: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD changer.

Press the magazine EJECT button and pull itout. Check for an error message, and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Insert a CD.

Press the magazine EJECT button and pull itout. Check for an error message and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

CD Changer Error Messages

118

Page 121: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Playing a TapeF

eatures

119

PWR/VOLKNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

REWBUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

FF BUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

TAPEEJECTBUTTON

TAPEEJECTBUTTON

TAPEBUTTON

SKIP BUTTONSPLAY/PROGBUTTON

REW BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

FF BUTTON

SKIP BAR

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

REW BUTTON

PLAY/PROGBUTTON

TAPE BUTTON REPEATBUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

TAPE SLOT

REPEATBUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON DOLBYBUTTON

FF BUTTON

TAPE SLOT

REPEATBUTTON

LX MODEL

EX-L MODELwith RES EX and EX-L

MODELS

Page 122: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- -

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Makesure the open side of the tape isfacing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator willcome on to show you which side ofthe tape is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the PLAY/PROG button.When the player reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator comes on. If the tapewas not recorded in Dolby, turn it offby pressing the NR button. Dolbyremains off until you press the NRbutton again.

When you turn thesystem back on, the tape player willbe in pause mode. Press the PLAY/PROG button to resume play.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM or CD/CHG (CD/TAPE)button. To change back to the tapeplayer, press the TAPE button.

To rewind the tape,push the REW button. You will seeREW in the display. To fast forwardthe tape, push the FF button. Youwill see FF displayed. Press the FF,REW, or PLAY/PROG button totake the system out of rewind or fastforward.

Press the / ( )buttons to find the beginning of thecurrent song or passage. Press the

/ ( ) buttons to find thebeginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton. If you want to turn the playeroff, press the PWR/VOL knob orturn off the ignition. The tape willremain in the drive.

LX Models

Optional on LX models

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation.

To Play a Tape

To Stop Playing a Tape

Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

SKIP

Playing a Tape

120

Page 123: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The SKIP and REPEATfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

REPEAT Caring for the Tape and Player

Playing a TapeF

eatures

121

NOTE:

Page 124: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you are playing a CD

If you are playing a tape

If you are listening to the radio

, use the CHbutton to skip to the beginning of thenext track. You will see the CD andtrack number in the display.

, use the CHbutton to advance to the nextselection. You will see ‘‘FF’’ blinkingin the display. The system fastforwards until it senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

, use theCH button to go to the next presetstation. You will see the number ofthe preset button in the display. Tochange bands, press the AM/FMbutton.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The middle button adjusts thevolume. Press the top or bottom ofthe button and hold it until thedesired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The CH button has three functions,depending on whether you arelistening to the radio, playing a tape,or CD.

The MODE button changes theaudio mode between FM1, FM2, AM,CD, and DVD/AUX (if a disc isinserted).

Remote Audio Controls

122

CH BUTTON

VOLUMEBUTTON

MODEBUTTON

Page 125: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your Owner’s Manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, a dealer canaccess your code with the your radio’sserial number. To access the serialnumber, turn the radio on. It mustdisplay ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radiooff. Push the preset 1, preset 6, andpower buttons at the same time, thenquickly release.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost when thepower was disconnected.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five-digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

On EX and EX-L models

Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

123

Page 126: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Press and hold the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button. Change the hours bypressing the H (preset 4) buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time. Change the minutes bypressing the M (preset 5) buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time. When you are finished,release the CLOCK button.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing andholding the clock button, thenpressing the RESET (preset 6)button sets the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The right display shows the timewhen the ignition is in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Press and hold the SET (TUNE)button until the numbers flash.Change the hours by pressing theH ( ) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M ( )button until the numbers advance tothe desired time. When you arefinished, press the SET button again.

LX model

EX and EX-L models

Setting the Clock

124

SETBUTTON

CLOCK

H BUTTON

RESETMHM BUTTON

CLOCK CLOCK BUTTONLX MODEL EX and EX-LMODELS

Page 127: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

125

REAR SPEAKERSOFF ICON

PAUSEBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTONS

REAR POWERBUTTON

DVD BUTTON

FRONT CONTROLPANEL ENABLEDINDICATOR

REAR CONTROLSELECTOR KNOB

REAR CONTROL PANELENABLED INDICATOR

REAR SYSTEMDISPLAY

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

EX-L MODEL

Page 128: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Press the REAR PWR button. Toturn on the rear controls (ceilingpanel or remote), press the RRCTRL knob. The system’s iconshows in the right side display. Yourpassengers can then operate the rearsystem with the control panel in theceiling or with the remote control.Press the RR CTRL knob again toturn the rear controls off. You willsee the Rear Controls Off icon in theright display.

The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display.You must select another source.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off. You will see the RearSpeakers Off icon in the display. Thesound for the rear system is sent tothe wireless headphones.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

Your vehicle is equipped with a rearentertainment system that includes aDVD player for the enjoyment of therear passengers.

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (radio, tapeplayer, CD player, or DVD player)than the front seat occupants. Theaudio is broadcast through thesupplied wireless headphones.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) positionto operate the Rear EntertainmentSystem.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

Rear Entertainment System

To Turn On the System Rear Speakers

126

NOTE:

Page 129: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, turn theRR CTRL knob clockwise. Theamber RR LED comes on to showthat the control panel is enabled.

To play the radio or tape, the buttonsfor the front entertainment systemhave the same functions.

If a CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, select CD/CHG. If the CD is loaded in thelower player, select DVD/AUX.

The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can play DVDvideo discs and CDs. It featuresDolby noise reduction.

Turn the RR CTRL knob clockwise.The amber RR LED will come on toshow that the control panel is nowenabled.

Insert a DVD into the DVD/CDplayer below the front panel.

Press the PLAY button ifthe DVD does not start playingautomatically.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment System

To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel

PLAY

Features

127

DVD SLOT DVD EJECTBUTTON

Page 130: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

-+

-Press the PAUSE buttonto pause the DVD. Press the buttonagain or press PLAY to resume.Pause works only with the DVDplayer.

Press and hold thebutton to move forward; you will

see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press andhold the button to movebackward; you will see ‘‘REV’’ in thedisplay. Release the button when thesystem reaches the point you want.

Each time you press and release thebutton of the SEEK/SKIP, the

system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track orchapter. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track orchapter.

Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

Open the overhead screen bypushing on the button. The screenwill swing down part-way. Pivot thescreen the rest of the way. If youpivot the screen too far forward, pastthe detent, the display will turn off.Pivot the screen back to the detentto turn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

Rear Entertainment System

PAUSE

SEEK/SKIP

EJECT

128

OVERHEADSCREEN

BUTTON

REAR CONTROLPANEL

Page 131: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

▲ ▼Use the and buttons toselect from the stations on the rearcontrol panel set to the presetbuttons. Pressing the or

button will cause the system tosearch up or down the band for astation with a strong signal. You willsee SEEK in the display.

Use these buttons to select theentertainment source (radio, tapeplayer, CD player/CD changer, orDVD player/Auxiliary device). Theselected source will be shown in thedisplay. Make sure the rear controloperation has not been disabled withthe RR CTRL knob on the frontpanel.

On the rear control panel, use thePLAY/PAUSE/PROG button toreverse the tape direction. Press the

button to skip forward tobeginning of the next song orpassage. You will see FF flashing inthe display. Press the button toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current song or passage. You willsee REV flashing in the display.

Rear Entertainment System

Using the Rear Control Panel

To Play a Tape from the RearControl Panel

To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel

Features

129

REAR CONTROLSOFF BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

PLAY/PAUSE/PROGBUTTON

SOURCESELECTION BUTTONS MENU

BUTTON

ENTER BUTTONCHANNEL BUTTON

CHANNELBUTTON

Page 132: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

▲▼▲

Press thebutton to skip to the beginning

of the next chapter. Press thebutton to skip back to the

beginning of the current chapter.

To select the menuon the DVD, press the MENUbutton. Use the , , ,and buttons to move to thedesired menu selection, then pressthe ENT button to enter yourselection.

The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the open button. The screenwill swing down partway. Pivot thescreen the rest of the way. If youpivot the screen past the detent, thedisplay will turn off. To close thescreen, pivot it up until it latches.

Pressthis button when you want to pausethe DVD. Press this button again togo back to PLAY.

If a CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, select it bypressing the CD/CHG button. If theCD is loaded in the DVD player,press the DVD/AUX button.Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track.

Rear Entertainment System

SEEK/SKIP

MENU/ENT

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel

PLAY/PAUSE/PROG

To Play a CD from the RearControl Panel

130

Page 133: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the RRCTRL knob on the front panel.When using the remote control,point it at the rear control panel inthe ceiling.

The PLAY/PROG, PAUSE, STOP,SKIP, and FWD/REW buttons workthe same function as the front andrear control panel buttons.

The PLAY/PROG, PAUSE, STOP,SKIP, and FWD/REW buttons workthe same as the front and rearcontrol panel buttons.

You can use the remote control toselect the entertainment source(radio, tape player, CD player/CDchanger, or DVD player/Auxiliarydevice). The selected source will beshown in the display.

CONTINUED

Using the Remote Control

To Play a DVD

To Play a Tape, CD, or Radio

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

131

SOURCE SELECTIONBUTTONS

REW/FWD BUTTONS

STOP BUTTON

PAUSE BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SUBTITLE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

ANGLE BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

RETURN (T/C) BUTTON

DISPLAY BUTTON

Page 134: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- -

▲▼

Some DVDs have menus that allowyou to select a dubbed language,subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc.The menu contents will vary fromDVD to DVD.

In theMENU selection mode, pressing theRETURN button for less than twoseconds changes the MENU displayto the previous page.Pressing the RETURN button formore than two seconds while a DVDis playing brings the system into theTITLE enter mode. When you enteryour selection, the DVD player willstart playing from the selected title.

To change thecolor, contrast, aspect ratio, andbrightness of the video screen, pressthe DISP button. The current settingof one will be displayed on thescreen each time you press thebutton. Use the and

buttons to change the settingas desired. The display will disappearfrom the screen several secondsafter you stop adjusting the setting.

Many DVDs are recorded withsubtitles or dubbed in multiplelanguages. To select subtitles, pressthe SUBTITLE button. To select adifferent language than the onebeing heard, press the AUDIObutton. Continue to press and

release the SUBTITLE or AUDIObutton to scan through all availablelanguages.

Use the , , , andbuttons to select the desired

menu option. Then press ENT toenter your selection. Use the

and buttons to changepages. You can also use thenumbered buttons to enter the two-digit number of a menu option. Youdo not have to press ENT. Press thebutton again to close the window. On some DVDs,

the scenes are recorded by morethan one camera, giving differentviewpoints of the same scene. Bypressing the ANGLE button, you canselect a different viewpoint.

Rear Entertainment System

MENU and TITLE Buttons RETURN (T/C) Button

DISP Button

SUBTITLES and AUDIO Buttons

ANGLE Button

132

Page 135: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The remote control uses twoAA batteries. To replace thebatteries, put a coin in the notch onthe back. Turn it one-quarter, thenslide the cover off. Remove the oldbatteries. Make sure the polarity ofthe new batteries is correct whenyou install them. Slide the cover onuntil it locks.

When you are not using the remotecontrol, store it in holder in the frontseat-back pocket.

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Rear Entertainment System

Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries

Storing the Remote Control

Features

133

Page 136: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be playedin this system.

If you see an error message in the display while operating the DVD player,find the cause in the chart. If you cannot clear the error message, take yourvehicle to a dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error, or aDVD has been loaded inthe CD player

High Temperature

Low Vehicle BatteryVoltage

Press the EJECT button and pull out the DVD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the DVDPlayer. Make sure the DVD is not scratched ordamaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the DVD.Check it for damage or deformation.If the DVD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the DVD isejected, see an Acura dealer.Do not try to force the DVD out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Run the engine to recharge the battery.

Playable DVDs DVD Player Error Messages

DVD Specifications

134

Page 137: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Each headphone uses one AAAbattery. The battery is under thecover on the left earpiece. Toremove the cover, insert a coin in theslot and twist it slightly to pry thecover away from the earpiece. Pullthe cover outward and pivot it out ofthe way.

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. When using the headphones,make sure you wear them correctly:L (left) and R (right) are marked onthe sides of the frame. The antennasare in the front of the earpieces. Ifyou wear the headphones backwards,the antennas will be aimed awayfrom the system, affecting the soundquality and range.

To use the headphones, pivot theearpieces outward. This turns themon. To adjust the volume, turn thedial on the bottom of the rightearpiece. When you remove theheadphones, the earpiecesautomatically pivot inward and theheadphones turnoff. When not in use,store the headphones in the pocketof either front seat.

Replacing BatteriesWireless Headphones

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

135

VOLUMEDIAL TAB

Page 138: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are on theback of the center consolecompartment.

Remove the battery. Install the newbattery in the earpice as shown inthe diagram next to the battery slot.Slide the cover back into place on theearpiece, then press down on theback edge to lock it in place.

Rear Entertainment System

Auxiliary Input Jacks

136

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSBATTERY

COVERHEADPHONE CONNECTORS

VOLUMEDIALS

Page 139: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle. This alarm continues for twominutes, then the system resets. Toreset an alarm system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s front door with the key orthe remote transmitter.

Once the security system is set,opening any door without using thekey or the remote transmitter, or thehood, will cause it to alarm. It alsoalarms if the radio is removed fromthe dashboard or the wiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, the tailgate, or any door isnot fully closed. If the system will notset, check the Door and TailgateOpen Monitor on the instrumentpanel (see page ) to see if thedoors and the tailgate are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

62

On EX and EX-L models

Security SystemF

eatures

137

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 140: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The indicator on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel thecruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RESUME/ACCELbutton. The indicator on theinstrument panel will come back on.

Push in the cruise control masterbutton. The indicator on theinstrument panel will come on.

1.

2.

3.

Cruise Control

Using the Cruise Control

138

RESUME/ACCEL

CANCEL

SET/DECEL

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Page 141: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/ACCEL button. When you reachthe desired cruising speed, releasethe button.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/DECELbutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalwill cause cruise control to cancel.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.Push the cruise control masterbutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap on the brake pedal, the systemwill remember the previously setcruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the cruise control masterbutton turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed Cancelling the Cruise Control

Resuming the Set Speed

Features

139

Page 142: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

-The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinkTransceiver for about 20 seconds, oruntil the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then go to step1.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. They do nothave the safety feature that causesthe motor to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.HomeLink stores the code in a

permanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

On EX and EX-L Models

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

General Information

Training HomeLinkBefore you begin

Important Safety Precautions

140

Page 143: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it.

Press and hold the remote controlbutton and one of the HomeLinkbuttons at the same time.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. See if you do bypressing and holding theHomeLink button you just trained.If the red indicator blinks for 2seconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.Go to ‘‘Training With a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

The red indicator in HomeLinkshould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.

When the red indicator flashesrapidly, release both buttons.HomeLink should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

142

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

141

The remote control you are trainingf rom may stop transmitting af ter 2seconds. This is not long enough f orHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every 2 seconds until HomeLinkhas learned the code.

Page 144: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson, then release it. The indicatormay blink, or come on and stay on.You then have approximately 30seconds to complete the followingsteps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

142

TRAINING BUTTON

Page 145: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem, or would like information onhome products that can be operatedby HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515.On the Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button with a new device,you do not have to erase all thememory. Train the selected buttonover the existing memory codefollowing the steps under

.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Customer AssistanceErasing Codes

Retraining a Button

‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’

Features

143

Page 146: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

144

Page 147: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 146.................Fuel Recommendation . 146

.........Service Station Procedures . 147....................................Refueling . 147

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 148

...................................Oil Check . 149.............Engine Coolant Check . 149

...............................Fuel Economy . 150...Accessories and Modifications . 151

.............................Carrying Cargo . 153

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

145

Page 148: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

We recommend using gasolinecontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the Malfunction IndicatorLamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Premium fuel is recommended whentowing in certain conditions (seepage ).180

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

146

Page 149: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Consult your dealer.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Put the attachment into the slit.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least three times.If you do not properly tighten thecap, the check fuel cap indicatorand Malfunction Indicator Lampmay come on (see pages and

).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1.

2.

3.

4.5.

6.

68235

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Before

Driving

147

Pull

FUEL FILL CAP

SLIT

ATTACHMENT

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 150: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Pull the support rod out of its clip,and insert the end into the hole atthe center of the hood or the holeon the left side of the hood.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.3.2.

1.

Service Station Procedures

Opening the Hood To Close the Hood

148

LATCH SUPPORT RODCLIP

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Page 151: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back into itstube.

1.

2.

3.

4.

199

202

191

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check

Adding Oil

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Before

Driving

149

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARKMAX

MIN

RESERVE TANK

DIPSTICK

Page 152: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering andhard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

191

For example,

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

150

Page 153: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

152

241Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

151

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 154: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top the dashboard, and frontseat back could interfere with theproper operation of the airbags. Or,if the airbags inflate, the objectscould be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

This could prevent theairbag from inflating properly.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Modifying Your Vehicle Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attach or place objects onthe airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over orreplace the outside edge of a frontseat-back.

Accessories and Modifications

152

Page 155: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Front door and seat-back pockets

Rear cargo area, including thesecond and third row seats whenfolded flat

Console compartment

Rear compartment

Roof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

153

GLOVE BOX

CARGO AREACONSOLE COMPARTMENT

DOOR POCKETS

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

REAR COMPARTMENT

Page 156: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- ×Steps for determining correct loadlimit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.[The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.]

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity inStep 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

The maximum load for your vehicleis 1,158 lbs (525 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from1,158 pounds or 525 kg kilograms.

For example, if the maximum loadis 1,158 lbs and there will be five150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 408 lbs.

(1,158 750 (5 150) = 408 lbs.)

1.

2.

5.

6.

3.

4.

173

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

154

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 157: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown forward in a crash or asudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used overthe cargo area behind the third rowseats. When the third row seats arefolded down, the cargo cover can beinstalled in a forward position andextended over the larger cargo area.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

53

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Optional Separation Net

Optional Cargo Cover

Before

Driving

155

Page 158: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The hooks on each side of thetailgate and on the underside of thecargo area storage compartment lidare for plastic grocery bags. To usethe hook on the storagecompartment lid, open the lid, andattach the cord to one of the shaftsof the third seat center headrestraint.

The hookon the rear of the consolecompartment is for plastic grocery

bags.

On LX and EX-L models

Carrying Cargo

156

Page 159: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 System, the VSAsystem (EX-L model only), the tirepressure monitoring system, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 158.......................Starting the Engine . 159

..............Automatic Transmission . 160..............................VTM-4 System . 164

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 165

..................................Parking Tips . 167.............................Braking System . 168

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 169Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 171.............................VSA Off Switch . 172...........................Towing a Trailer . 173

......................Trailer Driving Tips . 180Towing Your Vehicle Behind a

................................Motorhome . 182Off-Highway Driving

..................................Guidelines . 183

DrivingD

riving

157

Page 160: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle has a higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

83

88

74

15

57

See page for additional driving off-highway guidelines.

183

Driving Guidelines

Preparing to Drive

158

Page 161: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START for more than15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

75

Starting the EngineD

riving

159

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. See

on page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

Page 162: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission.

To shift from any position, pull thelever toward you. You cannot shiftout of Park when the ignition switchis in the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY(I) position.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

160

SHIFT LEVER

Page 163: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpull the shift lever towardsyou.

Pull the shift lever towardsyou.

Move the lever.

3

3

3

3

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and pull the shift lever towardsyou to shift from Park to Reverse. Toshift from Reverse to Neutral, cometo a complete stop and then shift.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from Neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

163

CONTINUED

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

161

Page 164: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use Second gear:

For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

This position locks, thetransmission in first gear. Byupshifting and downshifting through1, 2, D , and D, you can operate thetransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

3

33

Drive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter3

Automatic Transmission

162

Page 165: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pulling the shift lever does notshift the transmission out of Park:

Set the parking brake.

Push down on the key while youpull the shift lever towards youand move it out of Park to Neutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then install thecover. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or finger nailfile to remove the cover. Carefullypry off the edge of the cover.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

3.

4.

5.

6.1.

2.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

163

Page 166: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The variable torque management4WD (VTM-4) system automaticallytransfers varying amounts of enginetorque to the rear wheels underlower traction conditions.

If more traction is needed when yourvehicle is stuck, or is likely tobecome stuck, you can use theVTM-4 lock button to increasetorque to the rear wheels.

The vehicle must be stopped withthe engine running.

doone of the following:

Press the VTM-4 lock button.

Move the shift lever to D or D .

Turn the ignition to LOCK (0).

The VTM-4 lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). It willautomatically engage again as thespeed slows below 18 mph (30km/h). The indicator in the buttonwill remain on.

Move the shift lever to first (1),second (2), or reverse (R) gear.Press the VTM-4 lock button. Theindicator in the button comes on.

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to move the vehicle,stop and reverse direction.

1.

2.

3.3

To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 lock,

VTM-4 System

164

Do not continually spin the f ront tiresof your vehicle. Continuously spinningthe f ront tires can cause transmissionor rear dif f erential damage.

Do not use the VTM-4 lock button ondry, paved roads. Driving on dry,paved roads with VTM-4 lock ON maydamage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noise andvibration can also result.

Page 167: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator and theappropriate tire on the tire pressuremonitor to come on.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified in the vehicleplacard and this owner’s manual (seepage ).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning indicator is on, oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the properpressure as indicated on the vehicle’stire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability. If the tire is flat, or if the tire

pressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire.

247

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Driving

165

Page 168: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The appropriate tire indicator andlow tire pressure indicator comes onif a tire becomes significantlyunderinflated. See

on page .

The indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure and tire monitor indicatorswill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).

After you replace the flat tire, theLow Tire Pressure indicator stays on.This is normal; the system is notmonitoring the spare tire pressure.Manually check the spare tirepressure to be sure it is correct.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

224

165

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Monitor

Low TirePressure Indicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Changing a Tire with TPMS

166

Page 169: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is on anincline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Make sure the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area, or take themwith you.

Lock the doors.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Parking Tips

Parking TipsD

riving

167

Page 170: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Braking System Design

Braking System

168

Page 171: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

this defeats the purpose of the ABS.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal as you steer away fromthe hazard. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You should never pump the brake pedal;

Brake Wear Indicators Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes

Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

169

ABS INDICATOR

Page 172: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave your dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

236

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS IndicatorABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Important Safety Reminders

170

Page 173: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

172

CONTINUED

VSA Activation Indicator VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) SystemD

riving

171

Page 174: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned toON (II), there may be a problemwith the VSA system. Have yourdealer inspect your vehicle as soonas possible.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the vehicle stabilityassist system on and off.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

217

224

VSA Off Switch

VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

172

Page 175: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle has been designed totow a trailer, as well as for carryingpassengers and their cargo.

To safely tow a trailer, you shouldobserve the load limits, use theproper equipment, and follow theguidelines in this section.

Be sure to read the Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines section on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

The maximumweight of the trailer and everythingin or on it depends on the number ofoccupants in your vehicle and thetype of trailer being towed (see page

).

Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance.

The weight that thetongue of a fully loaded trailer putson the hitch should be 5 to 10percent of the total trailer weight forboat trailers, and 8 to 15 percent oftotal trailer weight for all othertrailers. (See page for limits foryour towing situation). Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

183

175175

Load Limits

Towing a Trailer

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Driving

173

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Page 176: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo and the tongueload is 5,950 lbs (2,700 kg).

The maximumallowable weight on the vehicle axlesis 2,865 lbs (1,300 kg) on the frontaxle, and 3,155 lbs (1,430 kg) on therear axle.

The maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle and trailer is 9,700 lbs (4,410kg) with the proper hitch and fluidcoolers (see page ).

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described.

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Thencheck the tables on page thatyou do not exceed the limit for yourconditions.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Measure from the ground to thebottom of the trailer hitch.

Connect the fully loaded trailer tothe hitch.

Measure again from the ground tothe same spot on the bottom of thehitch.

Subtract the second measurementfrom the first measurement, thenrefer to the following table.

If the difference is more than 3 ¾’’inch, you have too much load on thetongue. Redistribute the load orremove cargo as needed.

1 ½’’2 ¼’’

3’’3 ¾’’

150 lbs (68 kg)250 lbs (114 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)

150

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

175

Estimating LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR)

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR)

If thedifference is:

Estimatedtongue load is:

Towing a Trailer

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

To Estimate the Tongue Load

174

Page 177: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing is Not Recommended

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing is Not Recommended

Towing a TrailerD

riving

175

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:BOAT TRAILERS

OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7 kg)

of luggage in the cargo area.

4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,300 lbs (1,945 kg)4,100 lbs (1,855 kg)2,000 lbs (905 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)220 lbs (100 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)3,300 lbs (1,490 kg)3,100 lbs (1,400 kg)2,700 lbs (1,220 kg)1,200 lbs (540 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)220 lbs (100 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

Page 178: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To accurately check your loads atthe public scale, the vehicle andtrailer should be fully loded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehiclewhile the attendent watches thescale.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 2890 lbs (1310 kg)

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit: 5730 lbs (2600 kg)

If you cannot weigh the rear axledirectly, calculate the rear grossaxle weight. Subtract the weight inStep 1 from the weight in Step 2.Limit: 2945 lbs (1335 kg)

Check the gross combined weight.Limit: 9700 lbs (4410 kg)

Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads

176

Page 179: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in Step 5 fromthe weight in step 6.Limit: See page .Range: 5-10% for boat trailers

8-15% for other trailers

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchaseHonda equipment whenever possible.

Your dealer offers a trailer pachagethat includes a hitch, a ball mount, awiring harness, a heavy-dutytransmission fluid cooler, and aheavy-duty power steering fluidcooler.

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed, maintained, andalso meets state, federal, province,and local regulations.

We strongly recommend that youhave your dealer install a Hondahitch and use the required fluidcoolers. Using non-Honda equipmentmay result in serious damage to yourvehicle.

To help prevent overheating, aheavy-duty transmission fluid coolerand a heavy-duty power steeringfluid cooler are required for trailertowing. These coolers are availableonly from your dealer.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourvehicle, as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling, stability, and brakingperformance.

6.

7.

175

175

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler

Weight Distributing Hitch

Hitch

Towing a TrailerD

riving

177

Page 180: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Honda requires that any trailer witha total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455kg) or more has its own brakes.

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicles hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your brake manufacturer formore information on installingelectric brakes.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. See page for propertire size, page for how to store afull size wheel and tire, and page

for information on changing aflat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

217228

225

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Safety Chains

Sway Control

Trailer Mirrors

Spare Tires

178

Page 181: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check trailerlight requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow.

To get to your vehicle’s trailerlighting connector, open the tailgate,remove the cargo cover, thenremove the rear panel trim. Theconnector is on the left side.

We recommend that you have yourdealer install a Honda wiring harnessand converter. This harness hasbeen designed for your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the mating connector andpins that mate with the connector inyour vehicle from your dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Trailer Lights

Towing a TrailerD

riving

179

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK-UP LIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/WHITE)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

Page 182: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle tires and spare are ingood condition and properlyinflated.

The trailer tires and spare are ingood condition and inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph(88 km/h). At higher speeds, thetrailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

To prevent the transmission fromshifting frequently, drive in the Dposition.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

Towing performance can beaffected by high altitude, hightemperature, or when climbingsteep grades. Therefore, premiumfuel is recommended when towingmore than 3,500 lbs (1,590 kg).

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.If you tow frequently, follow theSevere Conditions maintenanceschedule.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

146

Trailer Driving Tips

Break-In Period

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving Safely With a Trailer

180

Page 183: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If the vehicle’s wheels slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4lock (see page ). DisengageVTM-4 lock as soon as the boat isout of the water to prevent damageto the VTM-4 system.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to D . Donot ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speed,and steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

164

bottom

3

3

Trailer Driving Tips

Retrieving a Boat

Parking

Backing Up

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Driving on Hills

Making Turns and Braking

Remember, ittakes longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer. D

riving

181

Page 184: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle can be towed behind amotorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph (100 km/h) or severetransmission damage will occur. Toavoid damage to the 4WD system, itmust be towed with all four wheelson the ground (flat towing).

When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s attachmentinstructions carefully.

Perform the following procedureeveryday immediately before youbegin towing. Otherwise severeautomatic transmission damage willoccur.

Check the transmission fluid level(see page ).

Start the engine.

Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.

Shift to D, then to N. Let theengine run for three minutes, thenturn it off.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and anyitems plugged into theaccessory power sockets areturned off so you do not rundown the battery.

If you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

204 Do not overfill.

Extended Towing

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

182

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your car must be transportedon a f lat-bed or trailer.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Page 185: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance and four-wheel drive VTM-4 system allow youto occasionally travel on unpavedroads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trailblazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properlyand do not exceed your vehiclecargo load limits (see pages

and ).

Wherever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditionsallow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

154 173

Important Safety Precautions

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesD

riving

183

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in the owner’smanual.Keep your speed low anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

Page 186: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service and that you inspect yourvehicle. Pay special attention to thecondition of the tires and check thetire pressure.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressure.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second gear (2) willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow and ice.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all roadconditions or obstacles, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not pumpthe brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember:

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

184

Page 187: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4Lock (see page ). Carefully try togo in the direction (forward orreverse) that you think will get youunstuck. Do not spin the tires at highspeeds. It will not help you get outand may cause damage to thetransmission or VTM-4 system.

If you are unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose.

Use a nylon strap to attach the Pilotto the recovery vehicle and carefullytake out the slack in the strap. Oncethe strap is tight, the recoveryvehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

Before driving through water, stopand make sure that:

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.

The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.

The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.Proceed without shifting or changingspeeds, and do not stop the vehicleor shut off the engine.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gentlypump them while driving slowly untilthey operate normally.

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

164

CONTINUED

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesD

riving

185

Page 188: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may be able to safely tow alightweight trailer (such as amotorcycle or small tent trailer) off-road if you follow these guidelines.

Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45kg).

Try to stay on smooth, level dirtroads, and avoid driving in hillyterrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Towing a Trailer Off-Road

186

Page 189: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 188.................Maintenance Schedule . 189

....................Maintenance Record . 195..............................Fluid Locations . 198

........................Adding Engine Oil . 199.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 200

..............................Engine Coolant . 202....................Windshield Washers . 203

.....Automatic Transmission Fluid .204...............................Differential Oil .205

....................................Timing Belt . 205

....................................Brake Fluid . 206....................Power Steering Fluid . 207

.............................................Lights . 208.....................................Floor Mats . 213

.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 213.................................Wiper Blades . 214

...............................................Tires . 216...................Checking the Battery . 221

.............................Vehicle Storage . 222

261

MaintenanceM

aintenance

187

Page 190: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when working

with the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

188

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations, andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Page 191: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Used primarily as a deliveryvehicle or taxi that is drivenmostly in stop-and-go traffic and/or parked with the engine idling.

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother vehicle parts. The load limitis shown on the tire informationlabel on the driver’s doorjamb.

The maintenance schedule assumesyou will use your vehicle as normaltransportation for passengers andtheir possessions. You should alsofollow these recommendation:

Trailer towing, driving with a rooftop carrier, or driving inmountainous conditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

If you onlydrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

146

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance Schedule

Which Schedule to Follow

U.S. Owners

Maintenance Schedule

Canadian Owners

Maintenance

189

NOTE:

Page 192: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your authorized dealer knows yourvehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orskilled person to keep yourwarranties in effect. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed at the recommended timeor mileage period to ensure long-term reliability.

Maintenance Schedule

Servicing Your Vehicle

Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

190

Page 193: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See pages

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

149

149

204 205

210

216

208

Maintenance Schedule

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance

191

Page 194: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

* *

Follow the Normal MaintenanceSchedule if the severe drivingconditions specified in the SevereConditions Maintenance Schedule onthe next page do not apply.

NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLYdrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

192

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 190 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brake wearCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearance

Replace automatic transmission fluidReplace VTM-4 rear differential fluidInspect idle speedReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

Replace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

((OOrr eevveerryy 77 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then

every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck inflation and condition once a month

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year,whichever comes first

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

1524

3048

4572

75120

90144

105168

120192

150240

((OOrr eevveerryy 22 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

((OOtthheerrwwiissee aaddjjuusstt oonnllyy iiff nnooiissyy))

See information on maintenance and

emissions warranty, page .

At every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) up to

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 1 year,

then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2

years.

At 45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 3 years,

then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2

years.

6096

135216

1:

2:

:

190

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

Page 195: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

# #

* *

# *

Follow the Severe MaintenanceSchedule if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions:

Driving in extremely hot [over 90°F(32°C)] conditions.

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop and go driving, such as a taxi ora commercial delivery vehicle.

Trailer towing, driving with a roofrack, or driving in mountainousconditions.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-icedroads.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) pertrip or, in freezing temperatures,driving less than 10 miles (16 km) pertrip.

Canadian Owners

193

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck inflation and condition once a month

Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months,whichever comes first

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months,whichever comes first

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

((OOrr eevveerryy 22 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule

except in dusty conditions)

((OOtthheerrwwiissee aaddjjuusstt oonnllyy iiff nnooiissyy))

((OOrr eevveerryy 77 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

((OOrr eevveerryy 22 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

1524

3048

4572

75120

90144

105168

120192

150240

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

6096

135216

7.512

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil filter

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 190 )Check front and rear brake wearInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesInspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Lights and controls/vehicle underbodyInspect drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearance

Replace automatic transmission fluid

Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluidInspect idle speedReplace timing belt and inspect waterpumpReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

Exhaust system , Fuel lines and connections

1, 2

, 3

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

Page 196: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

*#

194

At every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) up to 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 6 months, then every 15,000 miles (24,000km) or 1 year.Follow this schedule for rear differential fluid replacement if you use your vehicle for off-highway driving, trailertowing, mainly in stop-and-go driving. Otherwise, use the fluid replacement schedule in the Maintenance Schedulefor Normal Conditions.See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, page .

1:

2:

3:: 190

205

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

Page 197: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

195

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km

72,000 km

78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km

96,000 km

192193

Page 198: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record

196

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km

168,000 km

174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km

192,000 km

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km

120,000 km

126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km

144,000 km

Page 199: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

197

123,750 mi

127,500 mi

131,250 mi

135,000 mi

138,750 mi

142,500 mi

146,250 mi

150,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp198,000 km

204,000 km

210,000 km

216,000 km

222,000 km

228,000 km

234,000 km

240,000 km

Page 200: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Fluid Locations

198

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)POWER STEERING

FLUID (Red cap)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Page 201: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap, and tighten it securely. Waita few minutes, and recheck the oillevel. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine OilM

aintenance

199

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Page 202: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. The oiland filter collect contaminants thatcan damage your engine if they arenot removed regularly.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given on the maintenanceschedule.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

Changing the Oil and FilterSynthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

200

DRAIN BOLTWASHER

Page 203: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

4.

Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

201

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Page 204: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to between theMIN and MAX lines. Inspect thecooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

202

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 205: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

The low washerlevel indicator will come on when thelevel is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

2.

3.

4.

5.1.

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield WashersM

aintenance

203

RADIATOR CAP

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Page 206: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid into the tube to bring it to theupper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission

204

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Page 207: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- -

To thoroughly flush thetransmission, the technicianshould drain and refill it withHonda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drivethe vehicle for a short distance.Do this three times. Then drainand refill the transmission a finaltime.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely. Tighteningtorque:

The differential should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance schedule. Replace thebelt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) ifyou regularly drive your vehicle inone or more of these conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Frequently tow a trailer.

Check the fluid level with thedifferential at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thedifferential fluid filler bolt andwasher, and carefully feel inside thebolt hole with your finger. The fluidlevel should be up to the edge of thebolt hole. If it is not, slowly addVTM-4 Differential Fluid until itstarts to run out of the hole.

6.Timing Belt

Differential Oil

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil, Timing BeltM

aintenance

205

FILLER BOLT

CORRECT LEVEL

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

Page 208: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. Replace brakefluid according to the timerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

Brake Fluid

206

MAX

MIN

Page 209: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Power Steering FluidM

aintenance

207

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Page 210: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be performed byyour dealer or other qualifiedmechanic.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. Handle a bulb by its steel base,and protect the glass from contactwith your skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulb.

Insert the new bulb and make sureit is right side up. The tabs on thebase fit into the indentations in theheadlight assembly. Pivot the hold-down wire back in place, and clipthe end into the slot.

Reinstall the rubber seal and makesure one of its arrow is pointing up.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

208

NOTE:

CONNECTOR

BULB

Halogen headlight bulbs getvery hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause the bulbto overheat and shatter.

Page 211: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove the front turn signalbulb, push it in slightly and turn itcounterclockwise.

Install the new bulb into thesocket and reinstall it.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

Maintenance

209

Page 212: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Open the tailgate.

Remove the two screws, then pullthe rear light assembly straightback to remove it from the body.

Remove the socket of the burnedout bulb by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise, and pull itstraight out of its socket.

Install a new bulb into the socket,and reinstall the socket into thelight assembly.

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover. Remove thecovers by carefully prying on theedge with a small flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1.1.

2.

3. 2.

4.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

210

Page 213: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

Pull the light assembly out of thetailgate.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push a new bulb into thesocket until it bottoms. Reinstallthe assembly.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw under the lens.

Place a cloth on the middle edgeof a part of the lens on thepassenger’s side. Remove a part ofthe lens by carefully prying on itsedge with a small flip tippedscrewdriver.

Reinstall the back-up light cover.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

3.

Lights

Replacing the High-mount BrakeLight

Maintenance

211

SCREW

Page 214: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the inner fender in place.Install the five holding clips. Lockeach clip in place by pushing onthe center.Pull the inner fender cover away

from the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the five holding clips fromthe inner fender.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

Lights

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

212

HOLDING CLIP

Page 215: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you use aftermarket floor matsmake sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

The driver’s and right second rowfloor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals ormarking the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

If you remove these floor mats,make sure to re-anchor them whenyou put them back in your vehicle.

Floor Mats Cleaning Seat Belts

Floor Mats, Cleaning Seat BeltsM

aintenance

213

LOOP

Page 216: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

1. 2. Front only:

Wiper Blades

214

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

Page 217: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield. Lower thepassenger’s side first, then thedriver’s side.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Front only:

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

215

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE BLADE

Page 218: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose one to two psi (10to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, ifneeded, to match the recommendedcold tire pressures on the next page.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

165

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

216

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 219: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles), you will see readings 4 to 6psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )higher than the cold readings. Thisis normal. Do not let air out to matchthe recommended cold air pressure.The tire will be underinflated.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .247

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Inspection

Maintenance

217

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P235/70R16 104S 32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

Page 220: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires at these intervals:

Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Tires

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

218

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheels weights f orbalancing.

Page 221: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Wheels:

Tires:

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size explanation.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

199

198

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Replacing Tires and Wheels

TiresM

aintenance

219

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

P235/70R16 104S

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Page 222: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving condition or locallaws. Make sure they are the correctsize for your tires. Metal link-type‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Tires

Tire Chains

220

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Page 223: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the BatteryM

aintenance

221

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Page 224: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Disconnect the battery.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

If possible periodically run theengine until it reaches normaloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles(48,000 km) maintenance schedule(Normal Conditions) as soon as youtake it out of storage (see page ).The replacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time or mileage.

192

Vehicle Storage

222

Page 225: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

......................Compact Spare Tire . 224....................Changing a Flat Tire . 225

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 229................................Jump Starting . 230

..............If the Engine Overheats . 232.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 234..........Charging System Indicator . 234

..................Malfunction Indicator . 235...............Brake System Indicator . 236

......................Emergency Towing . 237..............................................Fuses . 238

..............................Fuse Locations . 241

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

223

Page 226: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on it.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ). Driving with thecompact spare tire may activatethe VSA system.

172

On EX-L models

Compact Spare Tire

224

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Page 227: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

The tools and jack are behind acover in the cargo area on thedriver’s side. Remove the cover bypushing the top of it.

Turn the jack’s endcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack and tools.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

2.

1. 3.

4.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

225

JACK

SPARE TIRETOOLS COVER

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Page 228: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The spare tire is storedunderneath the rear cargo area.Remove the plastic cover on thecargo area lining to access theshaft for the spare tire hoist.

Put the wheel nut wrench on thehoist shaft. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground. Keepturning the wheel nut wrench tocreate slack in the cable.

Remove the bracket from thespare tire.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. It is pointed to by amark molded into the underside ofthe body. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

8.

7.

6.5. 9.

Changing a Flat Tire

226

BRACKET JACKING POINTWHEEL NUT WRENCH

Page 229: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Place the flattire on the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap from theflat tire, and place the flat tire upunder the hoist.

14.10.

11.

12.

13.

16.

15.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

227

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Page 230: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Insert the hoist bracket into thecenter hole of the flat tire.

Slowly turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise to take up the slack ofthe hoist cable. Make sure thebracket is seated in the centerhole of the spare tire.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jacks’ end bracket to lock it inplace and replace the tools andcover.

Turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise until the flat tire restsagainst the underbody of thevehicle and you hear the hoistclick.

17.

18.

19.

20.

Changing a Flat Tire

228

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Always raise the spare tire hoist, evenif you are not stowing a tire. If thehoist is lef t down, it will be damagedduring driving and need to be replaced.

Page 231: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights, and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or do not come on atall, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

230

237

221

230

159

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

Starting theEngine

The Starter Operates Normally

If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

229

Page 232: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly (see page ).

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

1.

2.

3.

59

238

237Emergency

Towing

Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

230

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

Page 233: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

-Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from the vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

231

Page 234: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all the accessories, andturn on the hazard indicator.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

5.

6.

4.1.

2.

3.

237

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

232

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Page 235: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

7.

8.

9.

11.

10.

237Emergency

Towing

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

233

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 236: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure light. If it does not go outwithin ten seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving.(See on page

).

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.This indicator should never

come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible and you shouldtake immediate action.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

1.

2.

3.

4.

149

237

199

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

234

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

Page 237: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If your vehicle battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the indicator remains on or thefuel cap was not loose or missing,have the vehicle checked by thedealer as soon as possible.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capor replace it. Tightening the cap willnot make the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emission controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance,continued operation may causeserious damage.

To check if they are set, turn theignition to ON (II), without startingthe engine. The malfunctionindicator lamp will come on for 20seconds. If it then goes off, thereadiness codes are set. If it blinksfive times, the readiness codes arenot set. If possible, do not take yourvehicle for a state emissions testuntil the readiness codes are set.Refer tofor more information (see page ).254

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness CodesState Emissions Testing

Malfunction IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

235

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

Page 238: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, the brake

fluid level is probably low in thereservoir. Press lightly on the brakepedal to see if it feels normal. If itdoes, check the brake fluid level thenext time you stop at a servicestation (see page ). If the fluidlevel is low, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

237206

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator

236

Page 239: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

Refer toon page

for non-emergency towinginformation.182

Emergency Towing

Emergency Towing

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Towing Your VehicleBehind a Motorhome

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

237

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of the 4WDsystem. It should be transported on af lat-bed truck or trailer.

Page 240: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The vehicle’s fuses are located infour fuse boxes. The interior fuseboxes are located under thedashboard on the driver’s andpassenger’s side.

To open the passenger’s side, pullthe right edge of the cover.

The primary under-hood fuse box islocated on the passenger’s side. Thesecondary fuse box is next to thebattery.

Fuses

238

UNDER-HOODFUSEBOXES

PASSENGER’ S SIDE INTERIORDRIVER’ S SIDE INTERIOR

Page 241: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. The diagram forthe interior driver’s side fuse box ison the kick panel below the fuse box.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Remove the screwswith a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

1.

2.

3. 4.

5.

241 242

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

239

BLOWN

BLOWN

Page 242: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If a trailer light is burned out, checkif these fuses are blown when youreplace the light bulbs:

If those fuses are OK, but the trailerlights still do not work, there are twoblown 7.5 amp fuses in the trailerhitch wiring. To access the 7.5 ampfuses:

Open the tailgate and remove thecargo floor lid.Pull out the bottom of the tailgaterubber seal.Remove rear trim panel by pullingup on the inside edge of the reartrim panel, and unhooking the fourclips and tabs.After replacing fuses, and reinstallthe rear trim panel in the reverseorder of removal.

Primary under-hood fuse boxfuses 5, 7, and 24Interior driver’s side fuse box: 10Interior passenger’s side fuse box:10

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘COdE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

123

On EX and EX-L model

Trailer Fuses

Fuses

240

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

Page 243: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps.

123456789

10111213

20 A30 A20 A15 A15 A

20 A20 A20 A40 A40 A30 A40 A

Spare FuseSpare FuseRight HeadlightACG SHazardNot usedStopLeft HeadlightRadioPower Window MotorPower SeatRear DefrosterBack Up, ACC

1415161718192021222324

Rear A/CHeater MotorCooling FanSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare FuseBatteryCondenser FanMG ClutchIGI MainTrailer (accessory)

123456

40 A20 A30 A40 A20 A20 A

ABS F/S RelayVSA F/S RelayVSA MotorABS Motor4WDRear Accessory Socket

789

1011

15 A15 A15 A7.5 A

(15 A)

ETCSIG CoilLAFTPMS(FR FOG)

30 A40 A30 A

7.5 A10 A15 A

120 A30 A

7.5 A50 A

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

241

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Page 244: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

No. No.Amps. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

123

456789

10111213

1234567

8

910111213141516

15 A10 A7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A30 A

20 A20 A20 A20 A

10 A20 A

20 A

15 A15 A10 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A20 A

Fuel PumpSRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayPower Mirror, VTM-4Daytime Running LightECU (PCM), Cruise ControlOPDS, Rear WiperACC RelayBack-up Lights, InstrumentLightsTurn SignalsVTM-4Front WiperNot used

Driver’s Power WindowDriver’s Power Seat RecliningHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat SlidingNot usedDaytime Running LightDriver’s side Rear PowerWindowFront Passenger’s PowerWindowFront Accessory Socket, RadioSmall LightInterior Light, NaviPower Door LockBack UpMoonroofMoonroofPassenger’s Side Rear PowerWindow

Canadian models:

Canadian models

Fuse Locations

242

Driver’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

FrontFront

:

Page 245: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 244................................Specifications . 246

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 248Uniform Tire Quality

..................................Grading . 248.................................Treadwear . 248

......................................Traction . 248.............................Temperature . 249.............................Tire Labeling . 249

.......................Emissions Controls . 251.....................The Clean Air Act . 251

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 251

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 251

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 251

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 252....................PGM-FI System . 252

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 252

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 252

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 252

....................Replacement Parts . 252..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 253

..............State Emissions Testing . 254....Testing of Readiness Codes . 254

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

243

Page 246: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

244

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Page 247: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

245

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Page 248: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- - *

Specifications

246

Dimensions

Weights

Capacities

Air Conditioning

1.90 US gal (7.2 )2.40 US gal (9.1 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )2.9 US qt (2.7 )7.7 US qt (7.3 )

0.193 US gal (0.73 )

20.34 US gal (77.0 )

2.79 US qt (2.64 )

188.0 in (4,775 mm)76.3 in (1,938 mm)70.6 in (1,793 mm)

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

66.3 in (1,685 mm)66.5 in (1,690 mm)

9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)

HFC-134a (R-134a)24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)

ND-OIL8

106.3 in (2,700 mm)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steeringfluid cooler.

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

Change1 :

2 :

2

1

2

1

Page 249: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

--

---

------------

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

247

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Lights

60 W/55 W12 V

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T155/90D16 110MP235/70R16 104S

1°88’0°50’0°50’

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

10.0 : 1211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

12 V

5 W27 W/8 W

5 W21 W/5 W21 W/5 W21 CP (18 W)5 W18 W6.2 W5 W1.1 W3.8 W

12 V 65 AH/20 HR

14 V12 V 12.4 W

1.4 W

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,V6 gasoline engine

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

IZFR5K-11SKJ16DR-M11

HeadlightsFront side marker lightsFront turn signal lights/Parking lightsRear side marker lightsRear turn signal/hazard lightsStop/TaillightsBackup lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightIndividual map lightsTailgate lightVanity mirror lightDoor (Courtesy) lightGrab rail lightsConsole lights

See page 242 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 242 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 241 or the fuse boxcover.

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side(1157 NA)

(168)(7443)(7443)(921)(168)(921)(204)

(HB2)(168)

FrontRearFrontRearFront

NGK:DENSO:

Page 250: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

248

Page 251: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

- -

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire width in millimeters.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

P

225

55

16

94

V

R

Temperature A, B, C

Tire Labeling

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling

Tire Size

TechnicalInform

ation

249

P225/55R16 94V

Page 252: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

-The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN.

Date of manufacture.

Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Max Load

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

Max PressTire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

Tire Labeling

250

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

Page 253: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.164

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

The Clean Air Act

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

251

Page 254: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The three way catalytic converter is

in the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Emissions Controls

252

Page 255: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterTechnicalInform

ation

253

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERTHREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTERS

Page 256: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

254

Page 257: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determinesthe readiness codes are still notset, see your dealer.

State Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

255

Page 258: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

256

Page 259: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Customer Service................................Information . 258

....................Warranty Coverages . 259Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 260.....................Authorized Manuals . 261

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

257

Page 260: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

U.S. Owners:Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

244

Customer Service Information

258

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

American Honda Motor Co.Honda Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7D1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

(787) 250-4327

Page 261: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2005 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2005 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty CoveragesW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

259

Page 262: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

260

Page 263: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

*2005

HON

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S.only)

Authorized ManualsA

uthorizedM

anuals

261

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2005 Honda Pilot Service Manual

2003-2005 Honda Pilot

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003-2005 Honda Pilot

Body Repair Manual

2005 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual

2005 Honda Pilot

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2005 Honda Pilot

Honda Service History

2005 Honda Pilot

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61S9V02

61S9V02EL

61S9V30

31S9V620

31S9V720

31S9VM00

31S9VQ20

HON-R

Price

Each

$70.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

Page 264: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

SHIP

TO

PAYMENT

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Body Repair Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Service Manual:

Authorized Manuals

262

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 265: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

............................Capacities Chart . 246.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53

.............................Carrying Cargo . 153..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

..........................CD Changer . 113, 114.......................................CD Player . 111

........................Certification Label . 244............................................Chains . 220

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 225

...Accessories and Modifications . 151ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 77..............Accessory Power Sockets . 95

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 199.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 23

..........Airbag System Components . 23..............Air Conditioning System . 100

.....................Rear A/C Control . 105.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 217

......................................Antifreeze . 202Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 59, 169...................................Operation . 169

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 123.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 77

................Audio System . 106, 109, 119...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 21

.............Automatic Speed Control . 138..............Automatic Transmission . 160

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 204...............Checking Fluid Level . 204

.......................................Shifting . 160.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 160

................Shift Lever Positions . 161....................Shift Lock Release . 163

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 58, 234............................Jump Starting . 230

..............................Maintenance . 221............................Specifications . 247

..............................Before Driving . 145..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 20

...........................Beverage Holders . 95..................................Booster Seats . 50

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 169

.............Break-in, New Linings . 146...........................................Fluid . 206

....................Bulb Replacement . 210.........................................Parking . 93

.................System Indicator . 59, 236........................Wear Indicators . 168

.............................Braking System . 168.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 146

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 72

........................Brights, Headlights . 71Bulb Replacement

.....................Brake Lights . 210, 211..........................Back-up Lights . 210

................Front Parking Lights . 209........Front Side Marker Lights . 212

.................................Headlights . 208........High-mount Brake Lights . 211

.................................Rear Bulbs . 210............................Specifications . 247

.............Turn Signal Light . 209, 210..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 208

Index

A

B

C

IND

EX

I

Page 266: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

..............................Economy, Fuel . 150............Emergencies on the Road . 223.............Battery, Jump Starting . 230...........Brake System Indicator . 236

................Changing a Flat Tire . 225.....Charging System Indicator . 234

..................Checking the Fuses . 239.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 234...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 235

..................Overheated Engine . 232...........................Emergency Brake . 93

......................Emergency Flashers . 73......................Emergency Towing . 237.......................Emissions Controls . 251

.............Emissions Testing, State . 254Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 67Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 58, 235

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 72Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 63.................................Dead Battery . 230

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 260................Defogger, Rear Window . 73......Defrosting the Windows . 101, 103

....................................Dimensions . 246...............Dimming the Headlights . 71

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 204

..................................Engine Oil . 149....................Directional Signals . 62, 71

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 169.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 201

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 78..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 248

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

...........................................Driving . 157....................................Economy . 150...................................DVD Player . 125

........DVD Player Error Message . 134

Change Oil........................................How to . 200

.............................When to . 192, 193...Charging System Indicator . 58, 234

............Checklist, Before Driving . 158..................Childproof Door Locks . 79

Child Seats.........................................LATCH . 43

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47...............Climate Control System . 104

.........................Clock, Setting the . 124.....................Code, Audio System . 123

........................CO in the Exhaust . 251............Cold Weather, Starting in . 159

......................Compact Spare Tire . 224...................Console Compartment . 95.................Consumer Information . 258

.............Controls, Instruments and . 55Coolant

........................................Adding . 202....................................Checking . 149

.........................Proper Solution . 202...................Temperature Gauge . 66

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 251

............Cruise Control Operation . 138

....Customer Service Information . 258

Index

D

E

II

Page 267: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 212.................Hazard Warning Button . 73

........................................Headlights . 71........................................Aiming . 208

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 72............Daytime Running Lights . 72

..................High Beam Indicator . 63...........High Beams, Turning on . 71............Low Beams, Turning on . 71

.........................Reminder Chime . 72........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 208

...................................Turning on . 71...................................Headphones . 135

..............................Head Restraints . 87.................................Heated Mirror . 89

...................................Fan, Interior . 100...........................................Features . 99

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 147Filters

...............................................Oil . 200.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 73

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 225Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 204..........................................Brake . 206

..........................Power Steering . 207

................Windshield Washers . 203...................Folding the Third Seat . 85

..........................Four-way Flashers . 73.................................................Fuel . 146

...............................Cap Message . 68......................Fill Door and Cap . 147

...........................................Gauge . 66................Octane Requirement . 146

........................Reserve Indicator . 63........................Tank, Filling the . 147

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 239

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 150.........................................Gasoline . 146

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 63...........................................Gauge . 66

................Octane Requirement . 146........................Tank, Filling the . 147

................Gas Station Procedures . 147Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 67...............................................Fuel . 66

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight.......................................Rating) . 174

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight.......................................Rating) . 174

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 160........................................Glove Box . 96

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight.......................................Rating) . 174

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 58, 234

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 199...............................Overheating . 232

............................Specifications . 247

............................Speed Limiter . 162.......................................Starting . 159

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 251...............................Exhaust Fumes . 53

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 252

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 18

Index

FG

H

IND

EX

III

Page 268: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

.....................................Heater, Seat . 82.....................Heating and Cooling . 100

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 159.................High-Low Beam Switch . 71..............High-mount Brake Light . 211

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 140

.......................Hood, Opening the . 148

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 244Ignition

..............................................Keys . 75...........................................Switch . 77

............Timing Control System . 252........................Immobilizer System . 75

...Important Handling Information . iii.........Important Safety Precautions . 8

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 57...............................Infant Restraint . 39

......................................Infant Seats . 39...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 216

...................................Inside Mirror . 88.............................Inspection, Tire . 217

Installing a Child Seat...........................................LACH . 43

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47........................Instrument Panel . 5, 57

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72........................................Introduction . i

..................................................Keys . 75

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 226.......................................Jack, Tire . 225

................................Jump Starting . 230

.......................Label, Certification . 244.................Lane Change, Signaling . 71

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 20...........LATCH Anchorage System . 43

.........................................Lights . 71, 97....................Bulb Replacement . 208

.......................................Indicator . 57

.........................................Parking . 71..................................Turn Signal . 71

....................................Load Limits . 154......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 77

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 77

............................Fuel Fill Door . 147....................................Glove Box . 96

....................Lockout Prevention . 78.................................Power Door . 78

........................Low Coolant Level . 149.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 63

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 58, 234.................................Lower Anchor . 43

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 246.........................................Luggage . 153

..................................Maintenance . 187Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 191.................................Record . 195-197

......................Required Indicator . 65..........................................Safety . 188

.............................Schedule . 192-194

Index

I

J

K

L M

IV

Page 269: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 58, 235..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 84

...............................Meters, Gauges . 66.................................Modifications . 152

...................Neutral Gear Position . 161..................New Vehicle Break-in . 146

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 244

..............Panel Brightness Control . 72........................Park Gear Position . 161

...........................................Parking . 167.................................Parking Brake . 93

Parking Brake and Brake System...............................Indicator . 59, 236

.................................Parking Lights . 71..Parking Over Things that Burn . 253

..........................Playing the Radio . 106..................................Playing a CD . 111

......Playing the CD Changer . 113, 114...............................Playing a Tape . 119.............................PGM-FI System . 252

................Power Seat Adjustments . 83.................Power Socket Locations . 94

..............................Power Windows . 90.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 34

...........................Protecting Infants . 39...........Protecting Larger Children . 49

.............Protecting Small Children . 40

...................Radiator Overheating . 232Radio/CD Sound

........................................System . 106..........................Readiness Codes . 254

...............................Rear A/C Unit . 105............Rear Audio Control Panel . 129

........Rear Entertainment System . 125..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 210

............................Rear View Mirror . 88.................Rear Window Defogger . 73

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 70..........Reclining the Seat Backs . 83-86

.............................Reminder Lights . 57................Remote Audio Controls . 122

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 146.........................................Odometer . 66

...............................Odometer, Trip . 66....................Off-Highway Driving . 183...................Off-Road Precautions . 183

Oil........................Change, How to . 200..............Change, When to . 192, 193......................Checking Engine . 149..............Pressure Indicator . 58, 234

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 199

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 77Onboard Refueling Vapor

................................Recovery . 251..............................Outside Mirrors . 89

....................Overheating, Engine . 232....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 191

Index

N

O

PR

IND

EX

V

Page 270: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

.................Remote Control (RES) . 131.......................Remote Transmitter . 79

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 200

.................................Floor Mats . 213..........................................Fuses . 239

................................Light Bulbs . 208.............................Schedule . 192-194

................................Timing Belt . 205...........................................Tires . 218

.............................Wiper Blades . 214Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 21...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 149

...............................Restraint, Child . 34..................Reverse Gear Position . 161

......................................Roof Rack . 153................................Rotation, Tire . 214

......................................Safety Belts . 10............Safety Defects, Reporting . 260

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 54...............................Safety Messages . ii

.........................................Seat Belts . 10...............Additional Information . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 22

.....................................Cleaning . 213......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20

................................Maintenance . 21Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 20, 58...................System Components . 23

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15

....................................Seat Heaters . 82.................................................Seats . 83

............Folding the Second Seat . 85...............Folding the Third Seat . 86

..........................Head Restraints . 87.........Reclining the Second Seat . 85

............Reclining the Third Seat . 86.......................Third Seat Access . 85

...................Seats, Adjusting the . 83-86............................Security System . 137

...............................Serial Number . 244...........................Service Intervals . 189

.............................Service Manual . 261.........Service Station Procedures . 147

..........................Setting the Clock . 124Shifting the Automatic

.............................Transmission . 160.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 160

........................Shift Lock Release . 163Side Marker Lights, Bulb

.........................Replacement in . 212..............................Side Airbags . 11, 28

....................Cutoff Indicator . 30, 58...............................Signaling Turns . 71

.....................................Snow Tires . 219................................Sound System . 106

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 224

............................Specifications . 247....................Specifications Charts . 246

................................Speed Control . 138..........SRS, Additional Information . 23

...Additional Safety Precautions . 33.............................Airbag Service . 32

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

Index

S

VI

Page 271: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28........................SRS Components . 23

.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 58....START (Ignition Key Position) . 77

.......................Starting the Engine . 159In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 159................With a Dead Battery . 230..............State Emissions Testing . 254

........Steam Coming from Engine . 230Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 74.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 77

...............................Buttons . 122, 138...................Stereo Sound System . 106....................Storing Your Vehicle . 222

..........................Sunglasses Holder . 96..........................................Sun Visor . 96

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 32

.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 58...................System Components . 23

..................................Synthetic Oil . 200

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 210.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 223

....................................Tape Player . 119Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 248.....Emissions Control Systems . 251

..........State Emissions Testing . 254Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 253.......................Temperature Gauge . 67

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 105....................Temperature, Outside . 67...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 21

........Testing of Readiness Codes . 254..............Tether Anchorage Points . 47

............................Theft Protection . 123..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 253

..........................Time, Setting the . 124..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 74

....................................Timing Belt . 205

....................................Tire Chains . 220.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 225

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 165

...............................................Tires . 216..............................Air Pressure . 216

.........................Checking Wear . 217..........................Compact Spare . 224

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 248......................................Inflation . 216

..................................Inspection . 217..............................Maintenance . 218

...................................Replacing . 219......................................Rotating . 218

...........................................Snow . 219............................Specifications . 247

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 225Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 173................Emergency Wrecker . 237

....Equipment and Accessories . 179.......................Traction Devices . 220

Your Vehicle Behind a............................Motorhome . 182.............................Weight Limit . 175

......................Trailer Driving Tips . 180

IndexIN

DE

X

T

VII

Page 272: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 204

...........................Fluid Selection . 204..............Identification Number . 244.............Shifting the Automatic . 160

.....................................Treadwear . 248

.......................................Trip Meter . 66....................................Turn Signals . 71

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 223

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 248........................Unleaded Gasoline . 146

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 201

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 54

....................Warranty Coverages . 259Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 203............................Level Indicator . 63

.....................................Operation . 70Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 74............Alignment and Balance . 218

..........................Compact Spare . 224...............................Nut Wrench . 227

Windows..................Operating the Power . 90

...........................Rear, Defogger . 73Windshield

...........................Defroster . 101, 103.......................................Washers . 70

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 214

.....................................Operation . 70Rear Window Wiper and

.....................................Washer . 70....................................Worn Tires . 217

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 237

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 154......................Vehicle Dimensions . 246

....Vehicle Identification Number . 244Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 171..........................VSA off Switch . 172

.............................Vehicle Storage . 222

.................................................VIN . 244..................................Viscosity, Oil . 199..................................VTM-4 Lock . 164

Index

U

V

W

VIII

Page 273: 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0505OM/... · 2005 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual ... and Supplemental Restraint

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Power Steering Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Compact Spare Tire:

Front/Rear:

Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid(see page ).

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

207

206

205

199

204

20.34 US gal (77.0 )